Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.

2 .

Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. such as duct. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. electrical panels. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and plumbing fixtures. Add basic MEP elements. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. fixtures. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. such as mechanical equipment. Add more detailed modelling elements. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. electrical. and piping. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. 3 . Germany.

is located and accessed in the training files location.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. as well as how to open and save them. When you install the training files as instructed. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. After completing each exercise. your Training folder may be in a different location. NOTE Depending on your installation. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Create detail views. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. such as templates and families. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. to provide a richer and more finished design. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Contact your CAD manager for more information. For example. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Metric: files for users working with metric units. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. For example. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. When you open a training file. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. You do not design entire systems. however. In this exercise. templates. you can choose to save your work. you learn where the training files are located. Create schedules. annotations. and sheets to document the project. So. and tags. However. On the Contents tab. views. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Metric file names have an _m suffix. when you add ductwork. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial.

and click the Training Files icon. if you open settings. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and click Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. Accessing Training Files | 5 . Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. verify that Project Files (*. click ➤ Save As.rvt.rvt) is selected. you are prompted to save the changes. 4 Click the training file name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. For Files of type. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. double-click Imperial or Metric. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and you can open any supported file type. For File name.rvt and make changes. and click Save. 3 In the right pane. enter the new file name. For example. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 8 If you have made changes. a list of file types displays. select the folder in which to save the new file. the Open dialog displays. scroll down.

6 .

The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the hierarchy of elements. In this case. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In this case. You learn the terminology. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. sections. and phases when you need it. ■ ■ 7 . Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and plans. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If the length of the elevation is changed. 2D and 3D view.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the parameter is one of association or connection. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawing sheets. schedules. In the Revit MEP model. the floor or roof remains connected. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and schedules required for a building project. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. quantities. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. If you move the partition. scope. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. drawings. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. every drawing sheet. As you work in drawing and schedule views. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the operation of the software is parametric. hence.

For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. dimensions. and 2D detail components. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ducts. sprinklers. ducts. When you change something. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and reference planes are datum elements. sinks.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and electrical panels. For example. boilers. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. boilers. Examples include detail lines. sprinklers. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. filled regions. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. tags. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and electrical panels. levels. grids. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. sinks. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. walls and ceilings are hosts. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. tags. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. They help to describe or document the design. Datum elements help to define project context.

top of wall. programming is not required. However. first floor. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. If you can draw. North . you can explicitly control them. and drawings of the design. from geometry to construction data. and types. elevation views. for example. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. and so forth). Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. In Revit MEP. such as roofs. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. section views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. In other cases.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Most often. families. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. schedules. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. floors. or bottom of foundation. The project file contains all information for the building design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. This information includes components used to design the model. and ceilings. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. For example. you must be in a section or elevation view. To place levels. By using a single project file. Project: In Revit MEP. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Often. views of the project. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design.

However. each in-place family contains only a single type. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. Unlike system and standard component families. and similar graphical representation. A type can also be a style. identical use. Type: Each family can have several types. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. System families can be transferred between projects. For example. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can also display several project views at one time. For example. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. showing. and wires. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Then experiment with them. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. hiding.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. pipes. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. System families include ducts. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. With a few clicks. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates.

Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To return the panel to the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file.

project and system parameters. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for editing existing elements. and for switching views. architect-specific tools. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for running analysis on the current design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. select the tool first.. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and settings. data and systems. and CAD files. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. When working on the Modify tab. then select what you want to modify.

application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays frequently used tools. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. when adding duct. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. To keep a panel expanded. provides access to common tools. closes the application menu (double-click). By default. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides requested information. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). For example.

select a file to open... click. such as Export and Publish. (Save As) export the current drawing. select a template and create a new drawing. (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ...The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.

to. provides views including Default 3D. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. Camera. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.. or template file. and Walkthrough. (Licensing) close the file. or template file. but is not enabled by default.. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.. saves a current project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. click. annotation. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. To enable or disable a tool item..

these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Group. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Modify. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. To hide the Status Bar. Clipboard. workshared components. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. When you are highlighting an element or component. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . However. When you are using a command. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode.To undo or redo a series of operations. In addition. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Starting with the most recent command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. To show the Status Bar again. check the Status Bar. when you switch to another editing mode. displaying the same information. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. repeat the command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. or the Family Editor. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Clear the Status Bar check mark. This displays the command history in a list.

Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Place a Wall. When you place an element in a drawing. select one or more elements of the same category. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. On the Quick Access toolbar. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.To cancel or exit the current command. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. To change existing elements to a different type. click (Modify). for example.

In the following steps. For example. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.rvt. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. There are several ways to access zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks.

The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms in on the selected area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. 6 Click in the drawing area. on the Navigation bar. When you release the mouse button. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click . this is referred to as a crossing selection. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 To display SteeringWheels. In the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Modifying the View | 19 . 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.

To define settings for SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press ESC. 14 To exit the wheel. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. moving the wheel to the desired location. and click tin the Options dialog. click the SteeringWheels tab. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. ➤ Options. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. As you move the mouse.

Design. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. These are the drag controls.HVAC Plan . 2 Enter ZR. and open Level 2 . Small blue dots. After you are familiar with these tasks. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display along the ends. referred to as shape handles. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. called drag controls. as shown. bottoms. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Similar controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and select the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

click the Undo command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar.3 Click and drag the bottom control. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. In this example. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or press CTRL+Z. 6 On the Undo menu. select the first item in the list. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.

Performing Common Tasks | 23 . click to specify the starting position. and drag it to the left as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 10 Move the cursor to the right.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. In this case. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Some commands. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.

Select Mechanical . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 14 Enter VG. For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Click OK. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Return. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .End a command Some commands. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 13 To end a command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Supply. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Press ESC twice. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. such as the Modify Ducts command.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

such as the default project units and settings. and click Open.rte template. You can either select a template from the template library. use copy/monitor. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 5 In the New Project dialog. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can choose from several templates. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. 27 . and geometry from the starting template. click Training files. create and manage views. such as coordination review and interference checking. the default building levels and standard views. such as ducts and pipes. New projects inherit all the families. settings. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Finally. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. link files. under Template file. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and modify system settings. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. select Project. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you learn how to start a project from a template. In that case. system families. click Browse. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and loadable families. under Create new. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 6 Click OK.

15 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ Under Create new. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. for Energy Data.7 In the Project Browser. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. for City. review the construction materials listed. select Manchester. create another new project using the Construction template. 8 In the drawing area. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Click OK twice. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Click Cancel. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. select School or University. select Project template. (Browse). NH. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. and open North. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. In the Choose Template dialog. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. If you want to use a template other than the default. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. When you select the material. 10 Using the same method. select Level 1. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog.rte template and click Open. you can select it now. For Location. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. click (Browse). 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. navigate to Imperial Templates. click Edit. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. For example. under Energy Analysis. ■ For Building Construction. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. ■ ■ For Ground Plane.

23 In the left pane. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. plumbing. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and 5 1/2". 4 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 27 Click OK. click Sizes. 24 In the right pane. select Views. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Holding CTRL. click Wiring. 4 1/2". 5 1/2". 10 1/2". Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. for 3 1/2". 26 In the right pane. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and click Open. for 3 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and 12 1/2". Click OK twice. 33 Click OK. 25 In the left pane. under Pipe Settings. for 3/4". 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. For Categories.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. wiring. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 22 In the right pane. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. click Rectangular. and fire protection systems. click Round. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. piping. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 11 1/2". 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. After standard settings have been established for an organization. and demand factors for electrical systems. power distribution systems. select Identity Data. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark.

select Associated Level. sheets. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Auto . 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Then by. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select Project. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. For Sort by. From the Positioning list. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. To enable this coordination. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. In addition. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. under Template file.rvt. families. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. Linking Projects In this exercise. 5 Click OK. select Sub-Discipline.Origin to Origin. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Training. For Then by. click Browse. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select View Name. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 38 Close the file. under Create new. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. select Family and Type. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Click Open. and groups that are contained in a project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 4 In the New Project dialog.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click (Browse). and click Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.11 In the Places dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Add Value). click My Library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click OK twice. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and Import dialogs. or families. templates. click the My Library icon. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and change the name to My Library. Load. and select it as the library path. 15 Under Library Name. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Save. ➤ Open.

The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Places. 2 In the Options dialog. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 3 Under Settings. and decal image files. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . specify the new location here. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 9 In the text editor. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 5 In the text editor. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click OK. If you want to relocate this path. select Ignore words in uppercase. 23 Click 24 Click OK. (Remove Value) to delete the library. This path is determined during installation. 27 Click OK. click the Spelling tab. click Edit. custom color files. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you work in a large office. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 20 Click ➤ Options. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. such as bump maps. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. view the current path. 22 Select My Library. 14 Click in the drawing area. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 11 In the Options dialog. 19 Click Cancel. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 21 On the File Locations tab.

you modify snap increments. You can turn snap settings on and off. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 25 Close the file without saving it. and enter 1 . Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click the Spelling tab. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 2 In the New Project dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify snap settings. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 6 In the Snaps dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. 23 In the text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. In this exercise. 19 In the Options dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. delete sheetmtl-CU. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click OK. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click Restore Defaults. As you zoom in and out within a view. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. under Template file. work with snapping turned off. under Dimension Snaps. 24 In the Options dialog. 22 In the text editor. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Edit. click Close.. 20 Under Settings. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.rte. 18 Click ➤ Options. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.

Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. zoom out until it does so. This is the increment that you added previously. While sketching. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. deselect Chain. If it does not. TIP To zoom while sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.7 Under Object Snaps. 10 On the Options Bar. For example. such as ZO to zoom out. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. enter SM. use the wheel button on your mouse. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click OK. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. If you do not have a wheel button. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and move the cursor to the right. snapping reverts to the system default settings.

and move the cursor to the right. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 25 Click OK. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. and the wall edges. If you move the cursor along the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. and specify the wall endpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and delete the value 1’ .14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. with or without saving it. 19 Enter SM. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 26 Close the file. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.

43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

At the end of the tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. However. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. After finishing each exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you first configure the linked architectural model. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you can choose to save your work. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. As you create the mechanical system. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. In this lesson. This system consists of a cooling tower. duct system and a hydronic piping system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. 45 .autodesk. go to http://www. and then you create a plenum level.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. By following the recommended workflow. you first plan the system. you will understand the process. methodology. water source heat pump (WSHP). You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this exercise.

rvt. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and after the linked model highlights. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. you add a level for plenums. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. In this section. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. NOTE When working with a linked file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. Next. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. These components are defined in the architectural training file.Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. roof. under Constraints. select Room Bounding. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. not in the MEP training file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ceilings. and click OK. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. click to select it.

Click Plan View Types. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views.6 In the Project Browser. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Preparing Spaces | 47 . This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 16 Press Esc. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and double-click West . 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. enter 8'. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 9 On the Draw panel.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . For Offset. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). The new level is placed. and click OK.MEP. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and in the Plan View Types dialog.

Under Extents. For View Classification. for Level.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. NOTE After finishing each exercise. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter an Offset of 1' 0". it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. you can choose to save your work. For Sub-Discipline. Under Identity Data.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Plenum. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and for Offset. In this exercise. In the next exercise. and click Properties. for View Scale. for Default View Template. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Plenum Plan. For Cut plane. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. However. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In this exercise. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. for View Range. click Edit. ■ Click OK twice. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. enter 0. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select Level Above (Level 3). 20 In the Project Browser. select Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. select MEP . Under View Depth.Plenum. right-click Level 2 Plenum. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. for Top. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. and click Apply Default View Template.

and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. select New. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Offset.Space Plan is highlighted. and ceilings). For (Tag Location). Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. enter 0. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select Horizontal. select Level 2 Plenum. walls. For Space. For Upper Limit. click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Placing Spaces | 49 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.rvt. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Click OK. enter 219. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. ensuring coordination between the files. 9 Select the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.7 Click to place the space. for Number. 14 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Library. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . For Name.

19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify. For Upper Limit. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Placing Spaces | 51 . select Level 3. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Using the method learned previously. enter 0. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. For Offset.

under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

click Training Files. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Space Plan is highlighted. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. for Upper Limit.rvt. enter 0.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. select Level 3. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then press Esc.

and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. enter Corridor. double-click the space name. as shown. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Close the schedule view. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 In the floor plan. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space.7 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same method. change the space number to 216A. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. In the schedule. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and press Enter. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 16 Using the method learned previously. place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

indicating that it’s the active view. If necessary. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. you place a space in a chase. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.

enter Chase. select Roof Level. 10 In the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. 6 Enter VG. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Name.4 Press Esc. and then click OK. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select the space. click in the chase area to place the space. enter 4'. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Identity Data. For Number. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. select Interior and Reference. enter 225PC. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. enter 0. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Element Properties. for Upper Limit. On the Options Bar. In the plan view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. For Offset. for Upper Limit. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. right-click. For Limit Offset. expand Spaces.

You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. under Loaded Tags. select Space Tag With Volume.Space Plan. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. and maximize the view. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 17 Type ZF. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Bounding elements (such as walls. All spaces in the view are tagged. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the next exercises. ceilings. and click OK. 15 Press Esc. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . floors.

which removes the space from the Default zone. 1 In the Project Browser. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). you view and verify zones in the System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. under Spaces. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference.Zoning is highlighted. In this exercise. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. To display space reference lines.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click View ➤ Zones. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. it is automatically added to the Default zone.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. After a space is placed in an area.

The new zone is listed in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. As you do this. Instruction 221. you assign spaces to a zone. The Zone tool is active. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. the Edit Zone tab displays. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and Electrical 220 spaces.Zoning is highlighted. under Energy Analysis. select Occupiable. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next. and click OK. Using the Edit Zone tab. you can add or remove a space from the zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assign spaces to zones in the building. click Reference. under Spaces. and modify the zone properties.rvt. and verify the zones in the System Browser. and click Finish Editing Zone. select Computer Lab 222. double-click 121 Cafeteria. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and a new zone is created. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 4 In the drawing area. click Training Files.5 In the System Browser.

Expand HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. you need to activate the zone visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).In the System Browser. type VG. 5 With the drawing area active. To view the zone in the drawing area. Click OK. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. select HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Instruction.

and verify the zone in the System Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.West . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. enter 2 . click Training Files.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. for Name. indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning is highlighted. expand 2 . and click OK. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. under Spaces. 9 In the System Browser. To display space reference lines. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). click Reference. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You activated zone visibility in the views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. under Identity Data. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Area B. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click Finish Editing Zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .West . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 11 Close the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise.

15 Press Esc. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 8 In the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. Select Attached End.Zoning view to activate it.5 Click in the Level 1 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active. zoom out. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. click in the Level 2 .Zoning floor plan. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .

click Training Files. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. click the corner where the Top. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and click OK.Zoning to make it the active view. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.East. on the ViewCube. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. double-click the zone tag. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . enter Lounge . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and zone information. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Name Value.Zoning view. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Front.rvt. space. you verify the building.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.

The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you isolate the space. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Next. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. click (Isolate). Click (Highlight). Using the Highlight tool. and select 109 Lounge. With 109 Lounge selected. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. verify that Wireframe is selected. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane).

and then click OK. For Construction Type. ■ ■ ■ Next. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and in the People dialog. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. click . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and then click OK. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. For People. select Lounge/Recreation. verify that <Building> is selected. click . the space information displays for the selected space. click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. select 1_South_Lounge. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Electrical Loads. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.■ On the Details tab. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select 109 Lounge. and click OK.

View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and air changes per hour. cooling air temperature. click (Shading). NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and other room-bounding components. This indicates the outdoor air per person. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .00 °F : 54. heating air temperature. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and humidification set point.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. outdoor air per area. verify that 74. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that 70. the zone information displays for the selected zone. Next. verify that <Building> is selected. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.00 °F : N/A is specified.00 °F : N/A is specified. For Cooling Information. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and dehumidification set point. For Heating Information. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : 90. floors. This indicates the cooling set point. 12 Using the methods learned previously. Below the list of spaces and zones. roofs.

and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 0. enter 212P. for Number. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Because this is an unoccupied space. open MEP . it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis. click Cancel. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Energy Analysis. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Click OK. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select Plenum. select Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Level 3. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Name. 15 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. For Offset. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zone information. you verified building. and select space Plenum 212P. double-click Level 2 .22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click in the Value field. For Location. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . for Energy Data. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. under Energy Analysis.Space Plan. and verify that the space has replaced the void. On the Place tab. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. is selected. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. For Postal Code. for City. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. verify that Manchester. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. In this exercise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select School or University. enter 03101. click Edit.

first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. Under Heat Gain (per Person). NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Occupiable is selected. this option adjusts the times automatically. and click OK. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Level 1 is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Condition Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations.Audio Visual. for Building Service. both. for Values. and enter 50 sq. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. click in the Value column. or neither. select Specified. verify that New Construction is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. right-click.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click OK. and click Element Properties. For Space Type. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. click Edit. a cooling load. For Latent. ft. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and then click . In order to select a space. for Values. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and click OK. select space Library 219. If. ■ On the Weather tab. select Library . Select Area per person. select Heated and cooled. For Sensible. For Ground Plane. For People. under Volume Computations. enter 150 Btu/h. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. Click OK twice. verify that 1' 0" is specified. For Export Complexity. select Specified. For Building Construction. For Project Phase. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). enter 200 Btu/h. 8 In the drawing area. you need to select this option.

The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. for Values. for Values. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and under Heating Information. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and can be modified here. select Actual. select Actual. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. is specified. Under Power. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Manchester. For Location. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NH. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. select 219 Library. You have verified the building information. 12 Click the Details tab. You should correct the space error in the building model. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ Click OK. and click OK. verify that School or University is selected. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Select the space associated with the warning. For Electrical Loads. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Building Construction. click Information). There should be no warnings displayed. For Building Service. click Calculate. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Next. click Edit.

or zone information. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes.rvt. In this exercise.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. space. 19 In the drawing area. 3 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and a loads report displays. 15 Review the loads report for project. or make any changes to the model. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and zone information for the building model. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. weather. under Energy Analysis. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. click Training Files. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. Click OK. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.Space Plan. space. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. select HVAC Zones. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. select 219 Library. 17 In the loads report. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 16 After you review the loads report.

select Tonnage Range. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. under Schemes. and click OK.5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. in 1-ton increments. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. select the color scheme legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

rvt. In this exercise. for Select available fields from. click Training Files. select Spaces. For Name. In the next exercise.Space Fill is the active view. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . For Phase. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. more category options are available. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. select New Construction. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser.12 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Schedule building components. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Click OK. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. enter Space Airflow Schedule.

Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. In the Fields dialog. and then select Hidden field. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select Level. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. enter . for Formula.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Level. Header. select HVAC. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Then by. For Type. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Fields. Select Formula. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. and then click . and click OK. ■ Click Calculated Value. and then click Conditional Format. For Formula. select Air Flow. enter Airflow Delta. Select Ascending. select Airflow Delta. select Not Between. Click OK. click (Browse).■ Under Available fields. select Number. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Discipline. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and Blank line.

7 Close the file with or without saving it. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy.■ ■ ■ For Value. In the next lesson. In the Color dialog. ■ The schedule displays. In this exercise. Under Conditions to Use. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . and click OK. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. a view opens that contains the selected space. For Background Color. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. Click OK twice. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. verify that Show is highlighted. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. right-click to access schedule properties. select red. In later exercises. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. click the color swatch. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.

78 .

and work with the airflow schedule. you will create supply air systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. After system creation. After completing the air systems lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you modify air terminal parameters. In this lesson. Then. As you place the air terminals. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 79 . you size ductwork and validate your air system design. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and scroll to space 223.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the ceiling view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. the space crossing lines display. When you highlight a space using the cursor. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Supply Diffuser . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. type 12. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Also. If the host element is modified or moved. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. verify that Constrain is cleared. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 17 Move the cursor down.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . for Flow. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. select the diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. enter 425 CFM. 15 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Rectangular Face Round Neck .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . click Place on Face. and then press Esc to end the command. and then select both Copy and Multiple.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. the hosted elements are updated as well. 9 On the Placement panel. and press Enter.

Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 28 On the Placement tab. click Place on Face. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag.rfa. click Yes. 24 In the Open dialog. clear Leader. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and then press Esc. 25 In the drawing area. As you place the return diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. select one of the diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 21 On the Options Bar. as shown. and click Open. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Next. 22 In the drawing area.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Place 2 diffusers.

35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. Level. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . select Strong Reference. for Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click to select the lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. under Other. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 32 In the Project Browser. as shown. 31 In the alert dialog. select one of the return diffusers. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. click Yes.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

for Constraints ➤ Offset. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. enter 9' 0"2750. and click OK. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. click the Level 1 line. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. For the start point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . ■ ■ For the end point. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.

indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. including energy analysis. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. and click View ➤ Systems. the space crossing lines display. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space.rvt. right-click the title.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. In this exercise. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. However. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.Press Esc.

and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. On the Options Bar. System Name. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 11 In the drawing area. the number of elements is updated. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. As you add diffusers to systems. 15 Click Cancel. 12 In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and Flow value. Connect Into. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. review the Number of Elements.

which updates the name in the System Browser. In this exercise. for System Name. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. under Mechanical. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the air terminals are the children. 22 Click OK. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. under Identity Data. and the system connects them. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. for Mark. 18 Click OK. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 25 Click OK. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In this exercise. Rename the system Next. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.17 Using the method learned previously. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . click Training Files. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). In this case. When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the Network type provides several solutions.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.HVAC Plan. for Solution Type. Also. and display solution 1. A Generate Layout tab displays. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 In the drawing area. select the upper left diffuser. select Network.Design is highlighted. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the space crossing lines display. which provides various layout tools.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view.

enter 3'. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Offset. click Settings. enter 9' 10 1/2". 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Maximum Flex Duct Length.7 On the Options Bar. For Offset. click Modify. Click OK. you’ll get an error in a later step. For Flex Duct Type. Select Branch. For Duct Type. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. as shown. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type.Round. enter 9' 10 1/2". select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. or manually modify the duct. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select a different layout solution. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. For example.11 Click Finish Layout. as is the elbow itself. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. If the entire network does not highlight. highlight a segment of the main duct. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. under Graphics. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you can verify connectivity as you create a system. and then click OK. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. for Values Displayed. thus it is not part of the system. and click OK. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. The first time you press Tab.Flow. select By View. and click to select it. Using a flow-based color scheme. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. for Color Scheme. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Usually. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. a disconnection exists. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. but not all values are used in this view. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. fittings. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. select Duct Color Fill . and equipment. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.

24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and on the Options Bar. and then press Esc to clear the selection. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). for Schemes. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Airflow. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. under Mechanical . Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.Velocity. select one of the diffusers in the system. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 20 In the drawing area. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 26 Click OK. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and press Enter. and click OK. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select the color scheme legend. select the WSHP. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. select Duct Color Fill .The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view.

Select the upper segment of main duct. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Click OK. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Under Constraints. and then click to select it. Select Only. Select Restrict Height. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork and fittings are updated. and drag it to the right. click Cancel. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Calculated Size Only. for Branch Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft. select Friction. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter .Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and select 16". highlight a segment of the duct.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. static pressure. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. pressure.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). and pressure loss. Use the information that displays (flow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Using this tool. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

rvt. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. also known as the critical path. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 35 Click Finish.

and select the WSHP. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.HVAC Plan . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click to specify the end of the main duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .

for Offset. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 15 On the ViewCube. click the corner where the Top. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select the top right diffuser. 14 In the Project Browser. select 9' 10 1/2". The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Front.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.3D MEP. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. NOTE When drawing duct. right-click the connector grip. and click Draw Duct. double-click MEP .

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . the color fill indicates the flow value. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). Also. in space 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it is considered a closed loop. 22 Using the same method. 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created.

25 Press Esc. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. You can ignore the warning. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 30 Press Esc twice. and click to select it. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.

Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Constraints. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. for Flow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. under Mechanical . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click OK. 40 Using the same method.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Airflow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. such as a plenum.

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. 109 . including 2 base mounted pumps. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Automatically and manually lay out piping. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. In this lesson. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. Then. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place mechanical equipment. on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.

A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select WSHP . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Left Return . indicating that it’s the active view. in corridor 328.High Efficiency . verify that Wall faces is selected.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Tons . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown.Horizontal .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 7 On the Options Bar.

verify that the WSHP is still selected. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and enter 2'. click the top edge of the WSHP. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .8 Click the corridor wall face. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and in the Type Selector. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. and click to place the dimension. as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter 12 GPM. for Water Flow. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. enter 9'. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK.14 Click Modify. Under Mechanical. and click to place it in the mechanical room. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. for Offset. select the 2 WSHPs.

The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.21 Click Modify. you create the return and supply piping systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. including flow and pressure.

rvt. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. right-click the Systems column heading. where it is easier to review the information.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . but without a corresponding system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. analyses cannot be performed. indicating that it’s the active view. and click View ➤ Piping.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. click Training Files. Unlike logical connections (systems). Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . You can create pipes to connect system components. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 5 In the System Browser.Mech 330). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.In the System Browser. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Notice that on the Options Bar. Assigning a system component to an existing system. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and the Edit System tool is not active. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. As you assign equipment to systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. for System Name. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. select the boiler. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 12 In the drawing area. select the 2 WSHPs. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. This display indicates that the system is selected. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Therefore. 10 On the Options Bar. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. while pressing Ctrl. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 17 On the Options Bar.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 19 In the Project Browser. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.Design. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. under Design ➤ HVAC . Creating a Piping System | 117 . and select the cooling tower. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. You have created the hydronic return system. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. double-click Roof .13 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name.HVAC Plan .

Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 25 Select the boiler. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 29 Right-click CHWS. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Select. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 23 Close the roof plan view. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. In cooling mode. indicating the logical connection. and bypasses the cooling tower. In heating mode. and click OK. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and click Expand All. 28 Using the same method. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.22 In the Select Connector dialog. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.

and click Column Settings. under Mechanical. You also manually modify the layout path as required. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. you can view several parameters. and click Properties. enter 18 GPM. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. including the flow rate and size of the component. expand Piping. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. for Water Flow. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 31 In the Column Settings dialog.In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. and click OK. 32 In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .HVAC Plan . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. press Tab to highlight the system. 5 In the Filter dialog.Mech 330). The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. click Training Files. then the Select a System dialog displays. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click to select it. and click OK. 10 Click OK. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. click Check None.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 9 In the Select a System dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Design is highlighted. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. When you draw a box to select components. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. select Mechanical Equipment. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). indicating that it’s the active view. the boiler. you can place the cursor over a system component.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). A system preview displays in red. select CHWR. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.

duct. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 13 Click Cancel. select Perimeter. or architectural components. It does not reference the architecture. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . enter 1' 6''. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. click Settings. verify that Solutions is selected. structural beams. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. For Inset. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations.11 On the Options Bar. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

19 In the drawing area. to display the path with thinner lines. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 17 Optionally. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Verify the flow In a previous exercise. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and press Tab 3 times. and the flow for the other is 12. With each Tab.

and click OK. 22 Select the boiler. 24 Press Esc. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 23 Under Mechanical. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). and access its instance properties. under Mechanical. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

HVAC Plan . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. On the Options Bar. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Next. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically. the Number of Elements is now 8. which propagates flow throughout the system.Design. click Edit System. double-click Level 1 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. you physically close the CHWR loop. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 32 Click Finish Editing System. 27 On the System Tools panel. 28 In the Project Browser.

under Mechanical. select a WSHP. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click Cancel. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. as shown. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). 38 Using the same method.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . access its instance properties. 35 Using the drag control.

42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type.40 In the Select a System dialog. select CHWS. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Slope. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 41 Click OK. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. enter 0''/12''. and then click OK. enter 1' 6''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. Click Settings.

In a later exercise. (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . 46 Click Modify. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.

NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. or offset elevations are incorrect. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). select a different layout solution. Add piping to close the supply loop. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. To create the piping system. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click Finish Layout. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.50 Using the same method. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Either relocate the system components.

rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . double-click 3D HVAC Building.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design ➤ 3D Views.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. as shown. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you work in the training file. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. and the return pipes are magenta.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

as shown. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 4''.

The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click OK. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. select the return pipe riser. 12 In the 3D view. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and the boiler is connected to the return piping. select the boiler. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. The connections are automatically created. 13 In the plan view. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. and the lower one is secondary.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and click Draw Pipe.

In a plan view. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.7''. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and press Enter. enter 2'. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 1' . and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and you select 1 connector. for Offset. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.

19 In the plan view. As you place piping runs that are close together. and the appropriate fittings are created. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and select it. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 18 Press Esc twice. and click OK. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.

and click Draw Pipe. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 28 Press Esc. and click the minus symbol. right-click the bottom connector. and when the connector point displays.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click to draw the pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 29 If necessary. click to connect to the pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. you select the tee fitting.

for Offset. 33 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. enter 4'. select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 35 Using the method learned previously. these pipe connections were created automatically. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 9' 6''. and click to create the pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click Draw Pipe. ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. and press Enter. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . type 1'.

select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. you validate the flow through the system. and click Element Properties. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .37 Click Modify. Next.

you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 43 Press Esc. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 41 Using the same method. right-click. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow. Connect the cooling tower Next. 48 In the plan view. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. notice that under Mechanical. under Mechanical. In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. and click OK. The flow is being propagated through the piping. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is .39 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 or 50% of the Flow. 46 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 40 Click Cancel. When you create the pumps in parallel. and click Element Properties. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 42 Click OK. the value is 0 GPM. view the properties for the secondary pump. as shown. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet).

you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.50 In the 3D View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the water bypasses the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise.rvt. and close the dialog. click Training Files. select the cooling tower. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. When the valve is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and is heated by the boiler. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.

6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. and select Ball Valve . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Adding Valves | 143 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Design is highlighted. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 8 Press Esc twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. The bypass valve is closed by default. 4 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . as shown. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. indicating that it’s the active view. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

parallel to the previously placed valve. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. place another Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

19 Using the same method. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. under Mechanical. and select Ball Valve . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 20 Select the bypass valve. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Adding Valves | 145 . and click Element Properties. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. In heating mode. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). right-click. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and click OK. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.22 Using the method you just learned. click Training Files. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.rvt. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Initially. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. as shown. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. for Schemes. Sizing Pipe | 147 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK.Size. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Pipe Color Fill .4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK.Flow.

enter 5 FPS. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 13 Press Esc. Under Constraints. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and for Velocity. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and enter 2. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Select And. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.25 FT/100ft. Click OK. select Friction. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.

14 Close the file with or without saving it. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views. Using the System Inspector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. pressure. select a different layout solution. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Inspecting the System | 149 . click Training Files.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

This information helps you modify the system design. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. as required. and pressure information including pressure loss. An inspection flag reports the section number. flow. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).

88 psi. 10 Click Finish.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 9 Using the same method. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. inspect Section 6 again. as shown. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. select 90° F. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. you need to validate them. In this exercise. the Static Pressure is 7. for Fluid Temperature. and the Pressure Loss is 1.67 psi.89 psi. targeting those systems that need attention. and to size pipe. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.

A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. After you assign components to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.Design ➤ Floor Plans. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. thus assigning the components to a system. and for pipe sizing. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.Design. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. double-click Level 1 . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. For example. the pipe is associated with that system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. After you have assigned all components to systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.HVAC Plan . Warnings display. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 4 In the System Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. In the System Browser. and click View.rvt. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). If you place components without assigning them to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.Design. As you learned when placing components.HVAC Plan . the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 7 In the System Browser. and double-click Level 3 . but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. and click Show to view all of the system components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.

HVAC Plan . 10 Using the same methods. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. expand the Unassigned folder. and select Level 3 . 13 Right-click CHWR. click Close. otherwise. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. right-click Hydronic Return. 12 In the System Browser. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.Design floor plan.TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. and confirm unassigned system components. and click Expand All. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

and demand factors that are applied in the design. enter 1.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Select Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Material. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .04. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Copper. As you place components and create circuits. wiring. click Training Files. For Temperature. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Material. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Click OK. select Copper. select Wiring Types. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.Wire Sizes. ■ ■ For Factor. speeding up the design phase. select 90. You also add a wiring type. select 75. click (Open).rvt. distribution systems. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. expand Wiring . In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter THHN. For Temperature Rating. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ ■ For Value. for Custom Colors. Click OK three times. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click Background Color. select Red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create a panel schedule. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. 167 . Use the System Browser to check your design. as you place lighting fixtures.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. power circuits. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Then. First. Balance wire sizes and breaker service.

for the Spaces Category. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open).00 fc. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. You can create additional color schemes. click Training Files. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Under Scheme Definition.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. In the Color dialog. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. for Basic Colors. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select Orange. select the color legend. select the color for Less Than 20.00 fc. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Click OK. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. select Average Estimated Illumination. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By using orange as the color for this range.

Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.7 In the Project Browser. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 13 Click the Level 2 . 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The red field will clear once the +/.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.277. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.5 fc range. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).Lighting Ceiling plan. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.5 fc range is satisfied. zoom to space Library 219. 8 In the Project Browser.

23 Click OK. 20 Select the lighting fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 18 Click to place the fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Press ESC to end the command.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the fixtures will move accordingly. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. select Multiple. 25 On the Options Bar.

select the 3 fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 30 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. select Multiple. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219.

36 In the Filter dialog.277V. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None. and for Category. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

click the ceiling grid line as shown. 42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219. select Multiple Alignment.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 41 On the Options Bar.277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. The lighting delta is satisfied.

The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. you modify the light fixture IES files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .45 Press ESC to end the command.rvt. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.

Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Lighting Color Fill plan. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 2 Tile the views as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

■ Click Apply. for Lamp. Click OK.93. In the Select File dialog. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. specify 15000. select 463T5_S. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. select Xenon and click OK. Under Photometrics. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . Under Identity Data. enter . for Color Preset. ■ Click OK twice. In the Name dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ Under Photometrics. for Ballast Loss Factor. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. enter . enter F15. for Apparent Load.85. Under Photometrics.277V and click OK. select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.00 lm.00 VA. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. and click OK.ies and click Open. click the value for Initial Color. for Type Mark. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Initial Intensity. enter 162. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Under Electrical.

11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and for Category.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Check None. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 10 In the Filter dialog. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.

Note the lighting delta updates again. 15 In space Library 219. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture.Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

rvt. click Training Files. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. and receptacles to your design. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Junction Boxes.Press Delete. junction boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add switches. In the next exercise. and Receptacles | 183 . Placing Switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Click to place the switch.277V.

rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Select Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog. The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and Receptacles | 185 . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.

186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . NOTE When entering values. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. for Level 2 . Click OK twice. zoom to space Library 219. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. note the Number of Poles is 1. enter 9’0”.14 Press ESC to end the command. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. enter JB-1NL. In the Type Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. for Mark. 21 In the drawing area. 15 Select the junction box. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click Edit Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . Under Electrical. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.

and Number of Elements. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 24 For any column. Click OK. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Junction Boxes. Distribution System. 26 In the System Browser.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Select Size. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Name. Space Number. Expand Electrical. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Expand General. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. NOTE If necessary. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. and Voltage. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 187 . right-click and click Column Settings. 23 In the System Browser. Select Load.

29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 31 Close the System Browser.

Junction Boxes. 38 Select the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 . Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . move the cursor along the wall. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

43 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it.

You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). zoom to the space Electrical 220.rvt. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and work toward the higher voltage. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open).equipment. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.

14 Select the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. Click OK. for Distribution System.Loads. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 480/277 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A. 9 On the Options Bar. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. For Panel Name. for Max. enter 20.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 120/208 Wye. enter PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 On the Options Bar.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 20. click Check None. which is the logical connection between the elements. zoom to space Instruction 221. 20 In the drawing area. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. and for Category. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. For Panel Name. enter LP-2B. 23 In the Filter dialog. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Click OK.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .Loads. Click OK. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. for Max. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. #1 Pole Breakers.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC.28 Press ESC to end the command. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

44 Close the file with or without saving it. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Wires. 38 Press ESC to end the command. click (Open). Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 In the Filter dialog. for Hot Conductors. and for Category. Click OK. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK. click Check None. enter 2. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . except without wire.Loads.

12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Rating. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and verify that Load. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and then expand circuit 1. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 2 In the drawing area. Distribution System.rvt. right-click on the Systems heading. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. and Voltage Drop are selected. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. expand Power. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. click Training Files. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 13 In the System Browser. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Voltage.

View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 22 With the junction box still selected. change the Voltage to 277V.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Click OK. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Close the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. under Electrical. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

under Identity Data. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click Edit Type. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. for Type Mark. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click Yes. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 47 In the drawing area. Click Tags. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 .Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 40 Click OK twice. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click OK. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. click below the first one to place it. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. enter FR4.

59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Next you create a switch system. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Deselect Break and for Suffix. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. click Check None. Click OK.rfa. for File Name. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Save. enter a comma. and for Category. 52 In the Save As dialog. and click Apply. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click OK. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 56 In the Filter dialog. For Circuit Number. Click OK. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Break.

12 Select the occupancy sensor. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. for Switch ID. click (Open). 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. enter a. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical Lighting. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area.

under Electrical . 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. enter b. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting. for switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Click OK. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.

Next you create a circuit and size wire. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and for Category. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Power Loads | 207 . click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. click (Open). lighting.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and data systems. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Electrical Fixtures. select the PP-2B panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Circuits are used for power. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 7 In space Electrical 220.

enter 2. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Click OK. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. for Hot Conductors. 13 Select the wire again.rfa. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and click Element Properties. and in the drawing area.Loads. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select Wiring. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and in the right pane. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. under Electrical .

21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and click to select the circuit. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 22 In space Electrical 220. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.26 Press Delete. 29 In space Instruction 221. as shown. 28 In the drawing area. in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click the connector of the first receptacle. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. select panel LP-2B. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 3 In the Electrical space.rvt.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. Next you balance the loads for your design. Finally. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. click Open. zoom to space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.

4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.3712 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Scroll down. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. B. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . for Rating. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#10. and Phase C . and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#12. 1-#12. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Under Electrical-Loads. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog. 1-#10. enter 30A. Phase B 3636 VA. 6 Click OK. Click OK. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. click Rebalance Loads. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that the loads on Phase A. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties.3616 VA). 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.

and click OK. enter 30A. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 17 Close the warning dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . for Rating. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. under Electrical . 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Select PP-2B. Click OK.15 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Loads. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.rvt. and click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. enter 25A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. under Electrical . The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. click (Open). click Training Files. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.

rvt. for Font Size. enter 1/8. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. Under Body Text. Under Header Text. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays.Panel Schedules. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Header Text. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Edit. and open E601 . 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). 6 In the Project Browser. under Other. expand Sheets (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Appearance. for Font Size. 4 Close the report. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 3/32. for Font. select Berlin Sans FB. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 7 Select the schedule. 11 Click OK twice. select Bold and Italic.

notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. select space Lounge 212. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. each with a load of 180VA.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.

18 Select panel LP-2C. for Panel. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. zoom to space Electrical 214. 20 On the Options Bar. 15 In the dialog. 16 Close the details dialog. 17 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. under Warnings.

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 .Sanitary. planning is critical to a successful design. and click OK. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a PVC pipe type. 2 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this lesson. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. click Training Files. right-click PVC .rvt. type PVC .Plumbing Plan .Vent. click Duplicate. and click Properties. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. in addition to loading existing families. 219 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Name dialog. Adding a pipe size.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.

Sch 40 . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .rfa. enter -4' . enter 5/8''. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 21 In the right pane. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Tee. for Nominal. enter 10°. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.DWV. 6 Click OK. 15 For System Type. select Tee Vent . DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 26 Click OK. 17 In the left pane. PVC . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Modify. 22 Click New Size. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Tee. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 25 For Outside. 24 For Inside Diameter.Vent is listed. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Tap.0''. select Branch. In the Project Browser. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Sanitary. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 27/32''.Sch 40 . and click Main. select None.PVC . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select Plastic. For Offset. for Material.DWV: Standard. 18 For System Type. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . and click OK. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 13 In the right panel.DWV: Standard. Cross.Sch 40 . enter 1/2''. under Mechanical. 27 For the new pipe size. click Pipe Settings. 10 On the Selection panel.PVC .5 In the Type Properties dialog. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Sanitary.PVC . click Training Files. under Pipe Types. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.

Create the cold water system. including plumbing fixtures. vent. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. add a hot water heater.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . Create the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. sanitary piping. and hot and cold water piping.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . you add 2 toilets. 1 urinal. and verify that Level 1 . NOTE To identify a space name and number. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.rvt. including the men’s room (space Male 107).Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 1 wall-mounted urinal. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. against the left wall.6 gpf. as shown. and 3 sinks.Wall Mounted. 5 On the Placement panel.Flush Valve . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.1.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. under Water Closet . in the Type Selector. 4 On the Element panel. select Public .

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .7 Click to place another toilet. use the reference line to center the fixture.Wall Hung.) 8 Press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. under Urinal . Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. (Again. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. zoom in closer. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. above the first in the standard toilet space. and press Esc.

you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain . 14 Click Modify. select 5''x5'' Strainer .2'' Drain. 12 On the Placement panel.Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . click Place on Face.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.

and click View ➤ Piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and Default Domestic Cold Water. and review the components listed under this system.rvt. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and a floor drain. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. right-click in the System Browser table heading. a urinal. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. and verify that Level 1 . clear Lines (<Overhead>). verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 8 In the Filter dialog.Design is open. and click OK. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the plan view. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser.

The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. If you deselected the drain. so the Create Sanitary System is available. 12 On the Edit System panel. for System Name. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 In the Systems Browser. 11 On the Options Bar.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. enter Sanitary 107. click Finish Editing System. expand Sanitary.

at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. A preview of the piping layout displays. select one of the components in the system. and click OK. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base is placed. a toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. as shown. select Sanitary 107. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.

The default settings are automatically modified. enter 1/8'' / 12''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 23 For Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Solution Type. for Diameter.19 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Slope. select 4''. 21 On Options Bar. for Offset. select Intersections. enter -1' 0''. and for Offset. and click OK. click Solutions. enter -1' 0''. and click Settings. enter -4'-0”. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You accept this suggested solution. 24 In the left pane. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and modify it to meet project requirements. 27 Click Modify. select Main. select Branch.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. adding sinks in the men’s room.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. as shown. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

4 On the Element panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in the Type Selector. and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Public. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Rectangular.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. as shown. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 5 On the Placement panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select 22''x22'' . under Lavatory .

you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . On the Options Bar. select Multiple. and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. For example. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. 8 Select the sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. TIP When entering dimensions. enter 2' 4''.

11 In the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. Press Esc. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Add To System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 16 On the Edit System panel. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and press Enter to create the third sink. 12 In the drawing area.

and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the fitting.In the System Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click Draw Pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views. 22 In the plan view. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 19 In the 3D view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . with the tee fitting selected. 21 Select the tee. use the ViewCube to orient the view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . as shown. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D Plumbing.

enter 2' . 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this example. enter 1/8'' / 12''.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click to draw the pipe. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. and click Apply. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. press Spacebar. When you press the Spacebar. for Slope. for Offset.6''. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green.

select Standard.PVC . 30 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . 32 Select the double wye fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 29 In the Type Selector. click to place the fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. move the cursor over the stub pipe. under Wye 45 Deg Double . 31 Click Modify.

right-click the right connector. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right.33 With the fitting selected. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and click Draw Pipe. 37 Select the fitting. enter 1'. 36 In the section view. In the next steps. on the Options Bar. enter 6''. and press Enter. for Offset. zoom in to the double wye fitting. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 34 Press Esc. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. double-click the section head to open the section view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter.

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.

and click Draw Pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 49 Using the same method. press Spacebar. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. right-click the bottom connector. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 48 Click Modify. 47 Move the cursor down.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 46 In the section view. and press Esc.

53 Using the same method. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 56 Using the same method. under Trap P . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. 51 In the Type Selector. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 54 Click Modify.PVC . 55 In the 3D view. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 52 In the plan view.DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . select the P-Trap on the left.

and press Enter. In the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap.. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click in the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 6''. Click Modify. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Select the double wye pipe on the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. Move the cursor to the left. select the left P-Trap.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. On the Routing Solutions panel. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary. In the Type Selector. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.■ In the 3D view. and select a proposed solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew.

you continue with the work on the sanitary system. adjusting the sanitary stack. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. for Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Finish. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 62 On the Options Bar. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. and verify the slope. click Training Files.

DWV. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select the elbow fitting on the right.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Design. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 9 In the Type Selector.Plumbing Plan . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view.Sch 40 .Floor level line. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. right-click the top connector. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and click to draw the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select Standard.PVC . and click the intersection to place the fitting. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . select the vertical stack. 3 In the Section view. click Modify. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 7 On the Selection panel. as shown. 5 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe.Overall. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 14 On the Options Bar.PVC . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. enter 1'-0”. 13 Click the rotate control once.Sch 40 .11 Click Modify. under Plug . as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. for Offset. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 12 Select the fitting. 15 Press Esc. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .DWV. select Standard. 18 In the plan view.

click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.19 Click Modify.Design is open. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .rvt. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and verify that Level 1 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Plumbing Plan . 20 Close the file with or without saving it.

draw a selection box to select the toilets.) 10 Click OK. 17 In the Filter dialog. 7 In the left pane. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Main. 6 In the left pane. minimize the Sanitary system. and for System Type. select Domestic Hot Water. 15 In the plan view. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and click OK. and click Main. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select Branch.Overall. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Offset. for System Type. if necessary. select Plumbing Fixtures.Design ➤ 3D Views. 9 In the left pane. click Check None. urinal. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. for System Type.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 14 In the System Browser. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Branch. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. For Offset. and sinks. double-click 3D Plumbing . expand Unassigned. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. enter 9' 3''. select Domestic Cold Water. select Pipe Types: Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 In the right pane. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. select Domestic Hot Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Pipe Types: Water. To minimize opportunities for piping interference.

enter DCW 107. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. click Edit System. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 21 On the Edit System panel.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the System Browser. For Flow Conversion Method. Notice that the water main displays in blue. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 19 On the System Tools panel. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. click Finish Editing System. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. For Offset. 33 Click Modify. 36 Move the cursor to the left. as shown. and click the connector. For Slope. select 3/4''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 30 In the plan view. and click to place the pipe. under Pipe Types. enter 4'0”. at the intersection of the water main pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. and press Enter. enter 0”/12”. 37 On the Options Bar.2 7/8''. enter 3' . and press Enter. 35 In the Type Selector. 32 Move the cursor to the right. select Water. 28 In the Type Selector. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the top DCW connector. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 34 In the plan view. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. as shown. select the sink above the urinal. enter 7''. click to the left of the urinal.25 Using the same method. connect the second toilet. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 27 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 10'. for Offset.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 41 Select the top sink. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 .39 Move the cursor to the left. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). and click OK. and click to connect to the main cold water line.

add a water heater. you create the hot water system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.44 Using the same method.

Plumbing Plan . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Overall.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 In the System Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. expand the Unassigned folder. 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. select the 3 sinks. while pressing Ctrl. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.rvt. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

and click OK. select 0.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.Tankless. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. you edit the system to add equipment. and click Edit System. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Default Domestic Hot Water. under Water Heater . (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. In later steps. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. verify that DCW 107 is selected. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. as shown. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. When designing systems. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 10 In the System Browser. 13 In the plan view. 12 In the Type Selector. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.6 Gallon. 15 In the System Browser. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. for System Name. 14 Click Modify. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). Default Domestic Cold Water. in the Unassigned folder.

The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 27 Click Modify. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 24 Move the cursor up. as shown. for Offset. Slope: 0''/12''. enter 10’. and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 22 In the Type Selector. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. click Finish Editing System. and select Draw Pipe. Offset: 4' 6''. 23 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 Move the cursor to the right. select the water heater. enter 1' 6''. right-click the middle left connector. and click the water main line. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater. and on the Edit System panel.

and for Offset. for Offset. enter 1''. select a sink. select Domestic Hot Water 107.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 30 On the System Tools panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. click Finish Editing System. enter 1' 6''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. as shown. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and on the Placement Tools panel. select 4'-6''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. for Diameter. and in the System Selector. 33 On the Edit System panel. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). click Edit System. enter 9' 0''. 36 Move the cursor down. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 35 On the Options Bar. and press Enter.

39 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 1’. as shown. enter 2' 8''. and click just above the bottom sink. for Offset. 41 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and press Enter. 42 Click Modify.

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

If the tutorial training files are not present. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you can choose to save your work. and click Duplicate. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You create a new pipe type.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. 2 Right-click Standard. 267 .rvt. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. click Training Files.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In this lesson. However. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In this tutorial. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. for Material. 6 In the Project Browser. under Mechanical. select Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. and then click OK. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. For System Type. For Offset. For Pipe Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 9 Click OK. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. structural beams. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. In this exercise. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. and click Properties. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. or architectural components. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. click Rename. select Main. Next. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). For Pipe Type. select Carbon Steel. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . However. duct. For System Type. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and enter Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. verify that 9' 0" is specified. In the left pane.

for Name. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Add. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . Under Categories. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Zone 1. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 5 Click OK twice. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files. under Fire Protection. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select the upper half of the building.Design is highlighted. 6 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and then click OK. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Using a crossing window. for Sprinkler Zone. right-click. select Spaces. and click Element Properties. the space crossing lines display. For Group parameter under.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Sprinkler Zone. select Fire Protection. select space Instruction 221 as shown.

verify that only Spaces are selected. and then click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Using the same method. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 In the Filter dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. including a calculated value parameter. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. enter Zone 2. and click OK. and then click OK. select Zone 1.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. to which you add various parameters. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then access instance properties. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you create schedules for sprinkler design.rvt.

select Spaces. 14 Select the new header. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 9 On the Formatting tab. for Name. double-click on each column separator. Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. click the Formatting tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Click OK. enter 15. The schedule displays. For Name. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 10 In the Format dialog.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK twice. select To the nearest 1'. select Length. enter Light. and click Field Format. enter Maximum Spacing. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 6 Using the same method. and on the ribbon. select Feet and fractional inches. Obstructed-Combustible.Fire Protection Plan . For Group parameter under. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 7 Click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. In the Maximum Spacing column. For Key name. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Fire Protection. For Units. indicating that it’s the active view. For Type of Parameter.Design is highlighted. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Select Schedule keys. For Rounding. click Add Parameter. select Maximum Spacing.

Unobstructed Extra. enter 130. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Sprinkler Schedule. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. under Available fields. Unobstructed Ordinary. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 16 Using the same method. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter. Click OK. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. For Name.

For Type. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Area. 22 Click OK twice. Click OK. select Fixed. select 0 decimal place. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Enter the formula operator / after Area. under Other. 20 On the Formatting tab. In the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Number.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. and click OK. select Level. Select Header and Blank line. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. for Sorting/Grouping. for Sort by. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Units. click . The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Then by. and click View Properties. and click Field Format. select Sprinkler Zone. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. select Common. click Edit. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Rounding. For Discipline. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.

■ In the Format dialog. For Fields. right-click the schedule. 26 Click OK 3 times. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. select Level. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Level equals Level 2. for Filter by. click Edit. For Fields. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Number. Under Field formatting. and select Totals only. 27 In the drawing area. select Minimum Sprinklers. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then select Hidden field. 30 Click OK twice. select Hidden field. select Sprinkler Zone.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. and click View Properties. and then click Field Format. select Grand totals. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Then by (second instance). 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Filter.

For Category. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Embedded Schedule. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Calculate totals. for Available fields. and Count. double-click Type. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. select Sprinklers. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. delete the word Maximum. under Other. for Fields. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Count. On the Formatting tab. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Under Field formatting. and select Totals only. click Edit. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and click View Properties. select Grand totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. for Embedded Schedule. System Name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage.

Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. select Light. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click OK. select Ordinary. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. double-click FP . 44 In the schedule. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 48 In the floor plan. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Fire Protection Plan Design. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 52 Click OK. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. but their values are not determined. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 46 With the space still selected. 41 In the plan view. As a result. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Click Cancel. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 50 Access the instance properties. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. Unobstructed. and access the instance properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. However. go to http://www. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you will understand the process. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. 279 .rvt. At the end of this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. As you place the sprinklers. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. After finishing each exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and double-click Level 2 . methodology. click Training Files.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.autodesk. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. As you create the system. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you can choose to save your work.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.

2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When this happens. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 3 In the Project Browser. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. After placing the initial sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.

while pressing Ctrl. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. select the sprinklers that you placed. 11 In the drawing area. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Pendent . 9 In space Instruction 202. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Press Esc twice. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . as shown. and select Sprinkler . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.

14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. as shown. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Next. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Also. and then press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

enter 11. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and press Enter. 17 In the Project Browser. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 19 In the floor plan. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 18 Type WT. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. you place non-hosted sprinklers. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 16 Close the ceiling plan view. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and 200C). Next. Notice that the schedule updates. For Number.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . open Design ➤ FP . This number is determined in the schedule. move the cursor to the right. 29 Press Esc.FP_Ceiling view. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. under Constraints.Fire Protection Plan . for Offset. enter 14' 6". it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. you adjust the offset. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. specify a vertical offset. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 200B. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 25 Click OK. enter 10' 6". 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down.Design. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and click Element Properties.

Unlike logical connections (systems). 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.Fire Protection Plan . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the next exercise.30 Close the file with or without saving it. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. However. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. After creating the logical connection. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and with piping (physical connection). Creating a Piping System In this exercise.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this exercise.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. and select Piping. Creating a Piping System | 285 . The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. In the System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. as shown. named Fire Protection Wet. within the Piping Systems folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. click View ➤ Systems.

select an initial piping layout.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. enter FP Wet_Zone2. press Tab. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. click Settings. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Main is selected. system equipment. 14 Click Finish Editing System. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 In the drawing area. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. indicating the logical connection. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Next. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 19 Click OK. For Pipe Type. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar.Wet is selected. and click Select. and a piping layout preview displays. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and number of elements in the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. providing system editing tools. and on the Options Bar. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. In the left pane. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The Generate Layout tools are activated. select Branch. verify that 9' 0" is specified. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 13 In the System Browser. and select the system. for System Name. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. The Edit Piping System panel displays. For Offset. place the cursor over a sprinkler.

20 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Network is selected. select 2". as shown. In general. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -12' 0". The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and green represents branch lines). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Place Base. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). for Diameter. and select solution 5. 22 On the Options Bar. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 23 For Offset. When the layout is finished. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . click Solutions.

The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 29 Click Finish Layout. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. click Modify. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. as shown. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. On the Generate Layout panel. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.

31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. select a different layout solution. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Either relocate the system components. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. or manually modify the pipe. or that offset elevations are incorrect. and various manual pipe creation tools. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. the Connect Into tool. 32 If necessary. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Next.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.

and select the elbow fitting as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 1 In the Project Browser. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Plan .

mechanical equipment. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 12 On the Options Bar.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). for Solution Type. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. and pipe or duct is created. verify that Network is selected. 13 Click Finish Layout. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 14 Close the System Browser. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 8 In the corridor. air terminals. 9 On the Edit System panel. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. or a system component to display system tools. radiators. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and select solution 5. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. click Finish Editing System. verify that Solutions is selected. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. click Add To System. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel.

right-click. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 28 In the drawing area.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 View the result in the 3D view. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 27 On the Options Bar. for Offset. select 9'.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 24 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .20 Open Design ➤ FP . and click Draw Pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 25 Select the sprinkler. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and then press Esc. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 21 In the Piping Plan. 29 Using the same method. and then tile the views.

Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 31 In the plan view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Because the whole system highlights. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .

4 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. double-click on the section head to open the section view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. ■ 6 Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4". for Diameter.

Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select 1 1/4". 23 Close the 3D view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The pipe diameter is modified. 26 Using the same method. for Diameter. and maximize the floor plan. 24 In the drawing area. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . and then tag the piping as shown. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. as shown. 25 On the Options Bar.

Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. You added tags to pipes. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. In this tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . For additional practice. In this exercise. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. under Floor Plans. If the view included detail graphics. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Copy of Level 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click OK. 307 . 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. matchlines. right-click Level 1. and view references. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. dependent views. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and apply a view template. click Training Files.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Properties.

select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. create dependent views for areas B and C. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. to delineate splits in a large floor plan.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i.rvt. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 4 Using the same method. and click Apply Default View Template. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 9 Click OK. more focused. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. views and put them on the sheet. click Training Files. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and then press Esc. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the drawing area. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and then press Esc. for Target view. click the current value. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. on the Options Bar. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Weight./ ---). 13 Press Esc twice. select Double Dash 5/8". 21 Using the same method. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . and click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Click OK. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select 11. 20 Select the upper view reference and. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 19 In the drawing area. For Line Pattern. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select black. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as .12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. In the Color dialog.

27 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. as shown. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 25 Using the same method. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and zoom to each of the view references.

select Plumbing. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Documentation. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. The section crop lines no longer display.rvt. Click OK. Under Graphics. right-click 3D Plumbing. 2 Zoom in. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and click to select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. for View Classification.29 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plumbing Isometric. and select the section box.Domestic Water. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. For Default View Template. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. for View Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Apply Default View Template. For Sub-Discipline. enter Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping.

For Pattern. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 12 Using the same method. select 3. Click Apply. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.9 Right-click. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". select Dash. and click to select it. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and then click OK. press Tab 3 times.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

press Tab 3 times. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water view with detailing. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. In the drawing area. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click to select it. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Right-click. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 18 Using methods learned previously. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar. On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.Sanitary Waste. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. click Reveal Hidden Elements.15 Press Esc.

the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Press Esc twice. 21 Click OK twice. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. for Rounding. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. Creating Callout Views | 315 . and then place the callout view on a sheet.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. and click to place the spot slope annotation. click on the Format value. For Slope. you use a plan view to create a callout view. When the view is associated with a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. as shown. select To the nearest 1/8". verify that Common is selected. In the Format dialog.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Scale. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 5 On the Options Bar. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 1/4"=1'-0''. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).

13 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. double-click M601 . change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 317 . ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Click OK.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. under Sheets (all). drag it to the sheet. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. using the same method.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. for View Name. Click OK. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Default View Template. and select the viewport. 17 In the Project Browser. enter WSHP PART PLAN. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. enter Typical WSHP Detail. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. right-click the detail view.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. under Names.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 25 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Rename.

and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ work with model-based components. duct tags. linetypes. you learn how to: ■ add text notes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. 321 . symbols. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and annotation to create a legend.

under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.rvt. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 8 With the text still selected. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.

and then click Right Straight. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a segment of round duct. Creating Annotations | 323 . Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. a return diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add leaders 10 Select the text box.9 Press Esc twice. 16 In the drawing area. verify that Leader is cleared.

and click Open. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. under Category. 24 On the Options Bar. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 17 Click Modify. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. for Ducts. If necessary. click Load. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. clear Leader. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and click OK.

and Attached End. Leader. 26 On the Options Bar.25 In the drawing area. 32 In the drawing area. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. as shown. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 31 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. Creating Annotations | 325 . select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select Horizontal. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct.

select Free End. as shown. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

That’s because you changed a type property. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. lay out. 40 Using the method learned previously. and lock lighting fixtures. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. select Dot Open 1/16".36 Press Esc twice. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and click OK. not simply an instance property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select the last tag placed. for Leader Arrowhead. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and all elements of that type are affected. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.

8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. select the dimension line. indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. click Training Files.rvt. 12 Press Esc. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. and then select the interior face of the wall. On the Options Bar. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. annotation symbols. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Because the dimensions are locked. Creating a Legend | 329 . lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. enter 8'. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and notes. Creating a Legend In this exercise.3 1/2"). add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. linework.13 Using the same method. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . and press Enter. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 16 Press Esc. 19 Using the same methods. click the 3 interior locks on the line. and offset them 8' from the wall. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.

■ 9 In the drawing area. Click OK. For View. 10 Using the same method. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.rvt.8 Neck. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 5 Click in the drawing area. For Scale. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Training Files.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. click below the title to place the diffuser. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4" = 1' -0". enter Diffuser Legend. select Floor Plan.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Creating a Legend | 331 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc.

RISE symbol for the copy start point. and then press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 26 Press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 27 While pressing Ctrl. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. The selected detail lines are now thin. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP and its text note. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .

enter E.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND. and then click Modify. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.30 Select Spot Elevation . 35 Change the text on the right to N. Creating a Legend | 333 . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 34 Using the method learned previously. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.

40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected.

and text. A drafting view using detail components.rvt. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. indicating that it’s the active view.113 East elevation view. detail groups. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . 335 .Detailing 15 In this lesson. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A detail callout that references another view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.

select each of the 2 panelboards. clear Leader. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. and then modify and align the views. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 8 Using the same method.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.113 East on the sheet. Next. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 7 Drag the Power Riser . place Power Riser . 4 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and click to place it.

select the 113 North view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click OK. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 13 Right-click. and click Deactivate View. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Activate View. for Title on Sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.9 Press Esc. giving the appearance of a single view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. right-click. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. under Identity Data.

Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 21 Using the drag control. as shown. you add wiring to the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. right-click. 22 Press Esc. and click Activate View. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. select the 113 East elevation view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. right-click. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. In the next exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line.

9 Beginning at the transformer. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. expand Lines. and click OK. as shown. notice that there are no snaps active. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. enter Electrical Power. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. indicating that it’s the active view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 2 Close the Project Browser.rvt. In the New Subcategory dialog. click New. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Modify Subcategories. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. As you draw. In the Line Styles dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and then click OK. select 6. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i.113 North view. for Name. for Line Weight. verify that Chain is selected.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 11 Using the same method. for Offset. as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8". 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc.

15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 28 Click above the cap. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. as shown.

31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 On the Options Bar.

41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 3/32". and then press Esc.36 Press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and press Enter. You enter exact values for each line length. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. for Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .5. enter 0 0. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 42 On the Options Bar. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.

44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. enter Ground. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 47 In the drawing area. Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Using the same method. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. and press Enter. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. select all 3 lines. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and then press Esc. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. you can ensure that they stay together.25. while pressing Ctrl.125. 46 In the Project Browser. enter 0 0. 50 With the group selected. for Name. and click OK. click on the length dimension value. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog.

TP-2B. 52 Select the detail group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.51 Using the method learned previously. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. for Name. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In later exercises. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 2 Right-click the copy. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and click Rename. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and click OK. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and will place it on sheet E01. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.

and then click the corner where the Top.6 Select the section box. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and then press Esc. Back. 7 On the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. click Home. and Left sides converge.

right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Apply View Template.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. right-click. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. select 3D Views. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 3D HVAC Iso. Walkthroughs.

Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. as shown. 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Typical. 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor down and to the left. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. (Right). Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. type VP to open the instance properties for the view.To rotate and reposition a text label. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. as shown. and under Extents. 23 Click on the crop region. under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 25 Click OK. select Crop Region Visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and then click OK.

enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt. For Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select 3" = 1'-0". 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use detail lines to create a detail group. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.29 In the drawing area. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. click Training Files. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Place a detail component. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the isometric view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . right-click the view name. and click Properties.

select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Documentation. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). for Sub-Discipline. 13 In the drawing area. as shown. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing .4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click the point at the top of the drain. 12 On the Element panel. 9 Zoom in to the component. For View Classification. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". as the rectangle start point. select Plumbing. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK.

click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. for Type.P. select the filled region. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 18 With the filled region still selected. (Line). select C. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 22 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then press Esc. 23 In the drawing area. and click OK. Concrete. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select 1.I.

29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.28 Click Modify. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click to select them. select Multiple.

and then press Esc. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. (Rectangle). 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. as shown. 45 Using the method learned previously. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then select the side of the slab above the line.

Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.D. and then click to select them. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 49 Click Modify.. 52 In the Create Group dialog. enter Flashing Membrane_F. draw wide detail lines as shown. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the chain. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. for Name.

61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown.55 Press Esc.

Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and then click OK. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 70 In the Keynotes dialog.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 64 Press Esc twice.62 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 67 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. and use the grips to resize the masking region. as shown. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 72 If necessary. 71 Click Modify. select Leader and Free End.

Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. 76 To select the leader start point. 81 Select the text note. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the text insertion point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail.

open P103 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 88 In the drawing area. and click to place it. select the view title.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and then press Esc twice. 90 Press Esc. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details.

7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For Colors. select Visible. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. Click Open. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.rvt. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. for Line Weight. select Black and White. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.dwg. Click OK. select Auto-Detect. For Layers. you import a CAD detail drawing. For Import units. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. select 3. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. For A-----NPP. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view.

Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the viewport title. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Press Esc. open P103 . 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet.8 Type ZF. 12 In the drawing area.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful